<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jfinney</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jfinney"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Jfinney"/>
		<updated>2026-05-03T02:29:08Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.27.1</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3803</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3803"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:59:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting an IGES file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This IGES export feature is currently only compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks (as well as NX).&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' In order to import your IGES file into SolidWorks 2018, the Enable 3D Interconnect setting must be enabled. This can be found under Tools-&amp;gt;Options-&amp;gt;Import-&amp;gt;General.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also, this is currently only intended as a means of archiving your projects. We are working on improvements to this functionality to increase the usability of the exported file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This will be released in a future version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View full video tutorial here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fdyi_QXU7M0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting a STEP File==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your Protocase Designer Assembly as a STEP file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To export your file:&lt;br /&gt;
#Open your existing PDA file saved in the Protocase Designer software.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the &amp;quot;Export Assembly to IGES&amp;quot; option under the Export Menu in the tool bar at the top of your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#The software will process your request. The time that this step will take depends on the complexity of your design.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the export is completed, open your other CAD software and select your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: We support AP203 and AP214 STEP Application protocols.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3802</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3802"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:55:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Pockets==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pockets are most commonly used to have components sit flush with a protruding face, such as an LCD display. You can create a pocket out of any cutout that you make. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create a pocket:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#1. Click the Face Editor button on the Edit tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#2. Select the face you wish to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#3. Create a cutout using the cutout tool under the Mode tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#4. Select your cutout, and then click the checkbox that says &amp;quot;Pocket&amp;quot; under the Properties tool bar on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once you create your pocket, you can customize its specifications.'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to the geometry of tooling, no corner radius can ever have a 90-degree profile cut.&lt;br /&gt;
*The minimum corner radius for your pocket must be 0.016 inches.&lt;br /&gt;
*When customizing the depth of the pocket, keep in mind that there must be a minimum thickness of 0.06 inches remaining in the metal after the pocket is created.&lt;br /&gt;
*Pockets cannot be placed opposite to a bend, as pockets need access from above the face by the CNC mills.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Some combinations of pocket depth and corner radius may require tools that are not in stock. In these cases, a member of our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team will &lt;br /&gt;
reach out to you to review your design to see if you would like to either adjust your pocket so that it can be completed with stocked tooling, or we can source the tooling &lt;br /&gt;
required for additional lead time and fees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3801</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3801"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:49:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3800</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3800"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:49:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3799</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3799"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:47:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3798</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3798"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:47:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&amp;quot;A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&amp;quot;A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&amp;quot;A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3797</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3797"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:46:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3796</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3796"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:42:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool, &lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3795</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3795"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:41:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as PEMs, cutouts or images. Using this tool,&lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3794</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3794"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:41:28Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as PEMs, cutouts or images. Using this tool,&lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A linear array will create a *line of objects*. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A circular array takes your initial object, and &amp;quot;repeats it in a circle around the original object&amp;quot;. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outmost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A rectangular array takes your initial object, and &amp;quot;repeats it in a rectangle around the original object&amp;quot;. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3793</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3793"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:41:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Using the Array Tool */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as PEMs, cutouts or images. Using this tool,&lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A linear array will create a &amp;quot;line of objects&amp;quot;. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A circular array takes your initial object, and &amp;quot;repeats it in a circle around the original object&amp;quot;. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outmost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A rectangular array takes your initial object, and &amp;quot;repeats it in a rectangle around the original object&amp;quot;. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3792</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3792"/>
				<updated>2018-10-25T12:39:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Adding and managing layers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit-&amp;gt;Preferences-&amp;gt;Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &lt;br /&gt;
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text-&amp;gt;Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the &amp;quot;ghost&amp;quot; image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as &amp;quot;Plain SVG&amp;quot;. This should allow the SVG image to import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Array Tool==&lt;br /&gt;
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as PEMs, cutouts or images. Using this tool,&lt;br /&gt;
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To create an array:'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit Face&amp;quot; button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.&lt;br /&gt;
#With the object highlighted, select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; tool in the left tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity (the number of objects in the array&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*Total Radius (the radius of the outmost row)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Spacing (horizontal spacing) &lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)&lt;br /&gt;
#*X Quantity (number of columns)&lt;br /&gt;
#*Y Quantity (number of rows)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the &amp;quot;ungroup&amp;quot; button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that&lt;br /&gt;
your objects are properly spaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3781</id>
		<title>Using L-Shape Enclosures for PCBs with Opposing Connectors</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3781"/>
				<updated>2018-08-10T14:15:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This resource has been updated, and can now be found on the Protocase blog:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.protocase.com/blog/2018/08/02/why-l-shape-enclosures-are-ideal-for-pcbs-with-opposing-connectors= View blog post]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3780</id>
		<title>Using L-Shape Enclosures for PCBs with Opposing Connectors</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3780"/>
				<updated>2018-08-10T14:15:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This resource has been updated, and can now be found on the Protocase blog:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.protocase.com/blog/2018/08/02/why-l-shape-enclosures-are-ideal-for-pcbs-with-opposing-connectorstitle= View blog post]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3779</id>
		<title>Using L-Shape Enclosures for PCBs with Opposing Connectors</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3779"/>
				<updated>2018-08-10T14:15:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This resource has been updated, and can now be found on the Protocase blog:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.protocase.com/blog/2018/08/02/why-l-shape-enclosures-are-ideal-for-pcbs-with-opposing-connectorstitle=Help:Links&amp;amp;action=edit View blog post]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3778</id>
		<title>Using L-Shape Enclosures for PCBs with Opposing Connectors</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Using_L-Shape_Enclosures_for_PCBs_with_Opposing_Connectors&amp;diff=3778"/>
				<updated>2018-08-10T14:14:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This resource has been updated, and can now be found on the Protocase blog:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.protocase.com/blog/2018/08/02/why-l-shape-enclosures-are-ideal-for-pcbs-with-opposing-connectorstitle=Help:Links&amp;amp;action=edit View blog post]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For most computer enclosures, the U-Shape (clamshell) is the simplest to design and manufacture, and is fine to use when a component protrudes from adjacent sides. But if the enclosure is to accommodate a component that protrudes from opposite sides, such as a PCB with opposing connectors as shown below, the U Shape is not going to work.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:L-shape or u-shape1new.png|325px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Because the connectors protrude through each side of the enclosure, you cannot insert the PCB in a U Shape enclosure unless you stretch at least one enclosure side, in which case the enclosure will most likely be out of position when you bend it back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: l-shape or u-shape2.png|325px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: l-shape or u-shape3.png|325px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the two-piece L Shape enclosure instead, you can slide the board into the enclosure from one side without any bending, as follows.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Here are the top and bottom pieces of an L Shape enclosure, and a PCB with protruding connectors: &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:l-shape or u-shape4new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Slide the PCB into the bottom piece:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:l-shape or u-shape5new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Slide the top piece over the bottom piece with the PCB in place:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:l-shape or u-shape6new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The completed enclosure:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:l-shape or u-shape7new.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3759</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3759"/>
				<updated>2018-02-22T13:12:09Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting an IGES file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This IGES export feature is currently only compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks (as well as NX).&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In order to import your IGES file into SolidWorks 2018, the Enable 3D Interconnect setting must be enabled. This can be found under Tools-&amp;gt;Options-&amp;gt;Import-&amp;gt;General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View full video tutorial here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fdyi_QXU7M0&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3757</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3757"/>
				<updated>2018-02-09T20:15:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Download for free here.  View the 4.6 release notes here: Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/ here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6''']]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&amp;diff=3746</id>
		<title>Knowledgebase - Known Issues</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&amp;diff=3746"/>
				<updated>2018-01-15T17:12:04Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
The following issues might be encountered in the latest release. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===IGES Export===&lt;br /&gt;
We have been seeing an issue where a Protocase Designer file exported as an IGES file is unable to be imported into SolidWorks 2018.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This has now been resolved in the latest Solidworks update (Service Pack 1). Note, the '''Enable 3D Interconnect''' setting must be enabled. This can be found under ''Tools-&amp;gt;Options-&amp;gt;Import-&amp;gt;General''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Connection Issues when quoting / ordering===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connection issues have been resolved in the 4.6.13 release, but if you encounter &lt;br /&gt;
an issue, please refer to the FAQ entry - [[FAQ#Why_do_I_get_an_error_when_trying_to_register_in_Protocase_Designer.3F|'''Error when trying to register in Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line on 3D Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
This has been corrected in 4.6.13, but if you see this,&lt;br /&gt;
you can send your design to designersupport@protocase.com and we will remove it for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Windows 10===&lt;br /&gt;
There was an issue in Windows 10 Tablet Mode that would cause the Protocase Designer Menu Bar to be hidden. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This has been resolved in the latest Windows 10 automatic update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image Load Error for .JPG files===&lt;br /&gt;
Some .JPG files do not import with the Java tools used for Protocase Designer.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; If you receive an error message (&amp;quot;Unable to load image...&amp;quot;) when attempting to place a .JPG file on a face, we recommend that you convert the .JPG to a bitmap format, such as .PNG. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If for any reason you cannot save the .JPG as a bitmap, one program that works very well for converting images is [http://www.imagemagick.org '''ImageMagick'''], which is free and runs with Unix, Mac OS X, iOS, and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offset Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter an '''Offset Width''' and/or '''Height''' to the '''Grid Size''' and then use '''Snap to Grid''', objects do not snap to the correct coordinates. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Warning for grained finishes===&lt;br /&gt;
When part dimensions are too small for a grained finish, Designer issues a warning that you cannot use grained finish on galvanneal, even when the part is not galvanneal.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; Ignore the warning, but ensure the minimum dimension for a grained finish is 3” x 5”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer enclosure templates===&lt;br /&gt;
The computer enclosure templates allow you to specify dimensions that are below the minimum sizes required to accommodate the cutouts or PEM layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying/pasting text boxes and grouped cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Copying/pasting a text box does not retain the rotation of the box, and copying/pasting a group of cutouts mirrors the parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer enclosure welding===&lt;br /&gt;
In the ATX and Mini-ITX templates, both the '''Has Seam Welds''' and '''Has Tack Welds''' options can be selected. If both are selected, Protocase will perform only the seam welds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5-sided enclosure welding===&lt;br /&gt;
Designs using the 5-sided enclosure template do not include plug welding in the quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Importing graphics templates===&lt;br /&gt;
When using the '''Import graphics template''' command, Designer displays silkscreen-related prompts even when the face (or default) is set to Direct Digital printing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Loading times===&lt;br /&gt;
On standard machines, complex templates (such as a 3-Piece Rackmount, Recessed Consolet, or Tiered Consolet) could take a little extra time to load,&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; as could complex PDAs when first loaded after installing a Designer upgrade. Each release includes incremental improvements to these loading times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Trimming ellipses and circles===&lt;br /&gt;
Ellipses and circles will not intersect in the Trim mode with elliptical arcs or other ellipses.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; For example, if you draw an ellipse and then place a different shape on top of it, such as a rectangle or circle, there is no problem. But if you add an elliptical arc or another ellipse across the existing one, the objects cannot be trimmed or merged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5-sided enclosure with wall mounts===&lt;br /&gt;
When you attempt to quote a 5-sided enclosure with wall mounts, Designer opens the Design Errors dialog which states that the wall mounts require a hole in hanging parts required to add the powdercoat, and if you click the &amp;quot;Fix error&amp;quot; button the Edit Assembly dialog opens (erroneously). The warning can safely be ignored, since the wall mounts are welded on so they are not hung separately from the chassis. The defective warning and response will be fixed in an upcoming release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mirror Y===&lt;br /&gt;
When you click '''Mirror Y''' for an object (including text), the object does not stay in the exact same place, and you can get a Boundary Warning even if it is nowhere near a boundary. Until this is fixed, simply accept the placement, then move it back where you wanted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Vector graphics===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer does not support the ''display'' of vector files, but the production of enclosures with graphics at Protocase does require their ''use.'' For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding Images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L-shape and rackmount enclosures===&lt;br /&gt;
L-shape and rackmount enclosure designs created before January 2013, when loaded into the current Designer version, might have offset cutouts. If you encounter this problem, please email the design file to designersupport@protocase.com stating the problem, and we will manually convert the file for you at no charge. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Loading personal cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout Library Manager &amp;gt; Create Sub Assembly: When loading an item you have created, it is not yet displayed in the 3D View.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a PEM===&lt;br /&gt;
When placing a PEM or screw, if you click any tool, the items are placed and shown in the 3D View exactly ''as if'' you had clicked the '''Accept &amp;amp; Close''' button, but those items are not accepted, quoted or saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements | Planned Enhancements]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released | Software Fixes Released]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes&amp;diff=3745</id>
		<title>Release Notes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes&amp;diff=3745"/>
				<updated>2018-01-08T14:36:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New! January 2018&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|Latest Fixes in Beta Versions Released After Version 4.6.8]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Archival Release Notes=====&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes''' (February 2016)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Feb13_17|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Feb13,17''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jan30_17|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jan30,17''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct04|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.3.3 Release Notes|Protocase Designer Release Notes for Versions 4.4.3 &amp;amp; 4.4.8]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes&amp;diff=3744</id>
		<title>Release Notes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes&amp;diff=3744"/>
				<updated>2018-01-08T14:35:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New! January 2018&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|Latest Fixes in Beta Versions Released After Version 4.6.8]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Archival Release Notes=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.5 Release Notes''' (February 2016)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Feb13_17|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Feb13,17''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jan30_17|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jan30,17''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct04|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Oct04,16''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09|'''Release Notes for BETA Version 4.5.3-Jun09,16''']]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Protocase Designer Version 4.3.3 Release Notes|Protocase Designer Release Notes for Versions 4.4.3 &amp;amp; 4.4.8]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3736</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3736"/>
				<updated>2017-12-27T14:14:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting an IGES file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This IGES export feature is compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks, and most other CAD.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In order to import your IGES file into SolidWorks 2018, the Enable 3D Interconnect setting must be enabled. This can be found under Tools-&amp;gt;Options-&amp;gt;Import-&amp;gt;General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View full video tutorial here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fdyi_QXU7M0&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&amp;diff=3733</id>
		<title>Knowledgebase - Known Issues</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&amp;diff=3733"/>
				<updated>2017-12-08T18:27:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
The following issues might be encountered in the latest release. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===IGES Export===&lt;br /&gt;
We have been seeing an issue where a Protocase Designer file exported as an IGES file is unable to be imported into SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
We have reached out to the SolidWorks team to have this corrected ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Connection Issues when quoting / ordering===&lt;br /&gt;
We have been seeing an issue where Protocase Designer users are sometimes unable to connect to our servers. &lt;br /&gt;
We are working on a solution to be included in the next release, but if you encounter this,&lt;br /&gt;
you can send your design to info@protocase.com and we will do our best to assist you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line on 3D Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
In certain circumstances there may be an unwanted line created on your enclosure that cannot be deleted. This will be corrected in 4.6.13, but if you see this,&lt;br /&gt;
you can send your design to designersupport@protocase.com and we will remove it for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exclusion Zone Warnings when placing user handles===&lt;br /&gt;
When a user adds a handle from the Cutout Library, there may be numerous design warnings presented.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be corrected in 4.6.13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L-Shape - incorrect hole placement===&lt;br /&gt;
On the L-Shape template, on the left side, the lower left screw may be out of place with the corresponding hole.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be corrected in version 4.6.13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L-Shape W Base Mounts - extra screws===&lt;br /&gt;
For certain sizes of the L-Shape With Base Mounts template, there may be extra screws floating outside of the enclosure. These will not affect your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be corrected in the next release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matte Black Warning===&lt;br /&gt;
You may receive a warning message regarding Matte Black with Direct Printing. This is no longer applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
This will be corrected in 4.6.13.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Windows 10===&lt;br /&gt;
We have had reports of issues with Windows 10 and Protocase Designer 4.6. We are investigating these currently and will have solutions as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There was an issue in Windows 10 Tablet Mode that would cause the Protocase Designer Menu Bar to be hidden. This has been resolved in the latest Windows 10 automatic update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image Load Error for .JPG files===&lt;br /&gt;
Some .JPG files do not import with the Java tools used for Protocase Designer. If you receive an error message (&amp;quot;Unable to load image...&amp;quot;) when attempting to place a .JPG file on a face, we recommend that you convert the .JPG to a bitmap format, such as .PNG. If for any reason you cannot save the .JPG as a bitmap, one program that works very well for converting images is [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/binary-releases.php '''ImageMagick'''], which is free and runs with Unix, Mac OS X, iOS, and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offset Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter an '''Offset Width''' and/or '''Height''' to the '''Grid Size''' and then use '''Snap to Grid''', objects do not snap to the correct coordinates. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Warning for grained finishes===&lt;br /&gt;
When part dimensions are too small for a grained finish, Designer issues a warning that you cannot use grained finish on galvanneal, even when the part is not galvanneal. Ignore the warning, but ensure the minimum dimension for a grained finish is 3” x 5”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer enclosure templates===&lt;br /&gt;
The computer enclosure templates allow you to specify dimensions that are below the minimum sizes required to accommodate the cutouts or PEM layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying/pasting text boxes and grouped cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Copying/pasting a text box does not retain the rotation of the box, and copying/pasting a group of cutouts mirrors the parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer enclosure welding===&lt;br /&gt;
In the ATX and Mini-ITX templates, both the '''Has Seam Welds''' and '''Has Tack Welds''' options can be selected. If both are selected, Protocase will perform only the seam welds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5-sided enclosure welding===&lt;br /&gt;
Designs using the 5-sided enclosure template do not include plug welding in the quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Importing graphics templates===&lt;br /&gt;
When using the '''Import graphics template''' command, Designer displays silkscreen-related prompts even when the face (or default) is set to Direct Digital printing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Loading times===&lt;br /&gt;
On standard machines, complex templates (such as a 3-Piece Rackmount, Recessed Consolet, or Tiered Consolet) could take a little extra time to load, as could complex PDAs when first loaded after installing a Designer upgrade. Each release includes incremental improvements to these loading times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Trimming ellipses and circles===&lt;br /&gt;
Ellipses and circles will not intersect in the Trim mode with elliptical arcs or other ellipses. For example, if you draw an ellipse and then place a different shape on top of it, such as a rectangle or circle, there is no problem. But if you add an elliptical arc or another ellipse across the existing one, the objects cannot be trimmed or merged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5-sided enclosure with wall mounts===&lt;br /&gt;
When you attempt to quote a 5-sided enclosure with wall mounts, Designer opens the Design Errors dialog which states that the wall mounts require a hole in hanging parts required to add the powdercoat, and if you click the &amp;quot;Fix error&amp;quot; button the Edit Assembly dialog opens (erroneously). The warning can safely be ignored, since the wall mounts are welded on so they are not hung separately from the chassis. The defective warning and response will be fixed in an upcoming release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mirror Y===&lt;br /&gt;
When you click '''Mirror Y''' for an object (including text), the object does not stay in the exact same place, and you can get a Boundary Warning even if it is nowhere near a boundary. Until this is fixed, simply accept the placement, then move it back where you wanted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Vector graphics===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer does not support the ''display'' of vector files, but the production of enclosures with graphics at Protocase does require their ''use.'' For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding Images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L-shape and rackmount enclosures===&lt;br /&gt;
L-shape and rackmount enclosure designs created before January 2013, when loaded into the current Designer version, might have offset cutouts. If you encounter this problem, please email the design file to designersupport@protocase.com stating the problem, and we will manually convert the file for you at no charge. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Loading personal cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout Library Manager &amp;gt; Create Sub Assembly: When loading an item you have created, it is not yet displayed in the 3D View.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a PEM===&lt;br /&gt;
When placing a PEM or screw, if you click any tool, the items are placed and shown in the 3D View exactly ''as if'' you had clicked the '''Accept &amp;amp; Close''' button, but those items are not accepted, quoted or saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements | Planned Enhancements]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released | Software Fixes Released]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3732</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3732"/>
				<updated>2017-12-06T13:37:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/ here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3728</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3728"/>
				<updated>2017-11-29T20:35:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Download for free here.  View the 4.6.8 release notes here: Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/ here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3721</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3721"/>
				<updated>2017-11-23T17:48:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting an IGES file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This IGES export feature is compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks, and most other CAD.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View full video tutorial here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fdyi_QXU7M0&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&amp;diff=3713</id>
		<title>Knowledgebase - Known Issues</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues&amp;diff=3713"/>
				<updated>2017-09-18T18:42:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
The following issues might be encountered in the latest release. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Windows 10===&lt;br /&gt;
We have had reports of issues with Windows 10 and Protocase Designer 4.6. We are investigating these currently and will have solutions as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image Load Error for .JPG files===&lt;br /&gt;
Some .JPG files do not import with the Java tools used for Protocase Designer. If you receive an error message (&amp;quot;Unable to load image...&amp;quot;) when attempting to place a .JPG file on a face, we recommend that you convert the .JPG to a bitmap format, such as .PNG. If for any reason you cannot save the .JPG as a bitmap, one program that works very well for converting images is [http://www.imagemagick.org/script/binary-releases.php '''ImageMagick'''], which is free and runs with Unix, Mac OS X, iOS, and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offset Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter an '''Offset Width''' and/or '''Height''' to the '''Grid Size''' and then use '''Snap to Grid''', objects do not snap to the correct coordinates. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Warning for grained finishes===&lt;br /&gt;
When part dimensions are too small for a grained finish, Designer issues a warning that you cannot use grained finish on galvanneal, even when the part is not galvanneal. Ignore the warning, but ensure the minimum dimension for a grained finish is 3” x 5”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer enclosure templates===&lt;br /&gt;
The computer enclosure templates allow you to specify dimensions that are below the minimum sizes required to accommodate the cutouts or PEM layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copying/pasting text boxes and grouped cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Copying/pasting a text box does not retain the rotation of the box, and copying/pasting a group of cutouts mirrors the parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Computer enclosure welding===&lt;br /&gt;
In the ATX and Mini-ITX templates, both the '''Has Seam Welds''' and '''Has Tack Welds''' options can be selected. If both are selected, Protocase will perform only the seam welds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5-sided enclosure welding===&lt;br /&gt;
Designs using the 5-sided enclosure template do not include plug welding in the quote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Importing graphics templates===&lt;br /&gt;
When using the '''Import graphics template''' command, Designer displays silkscreen-related prompts even when the face (or default) is set to Direct Digital printing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grid offsets===&lt;br /&gt;
As of Version 4.5, the '''Offset Width''' and '''Offset Height''' fields in the Grid Size dialog have no effect. The grid origin will remain at 0,0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Loading times===&lt;br /&gt;
On standard machines, complex templates (such as a 3-Piece Rackmount, Recessed Consolet, or Tiered Consolet) could take a little extra time to load, as could complex PDAs when first loaded after installing a Designer upgrade. Each release includes incremental improvements to these loading times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Trimming ellipses and circles===&lt;br /&gt;
Ellipses and circles will not intersect in the Trim mode with elliptical arcs or other ellipses. For example, if you draw an ellipse and then place a different shape on top of it, such as a rectangle or circle, there is no problem. But if you add an elliptical arc or another ellipse across the existing one, the objects cannot be trimmed or merged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5-sided enclosure with wall mounts===&lt;br /&gt;
When you attempt to quote a 5-sided enclosure with wall mounts, Designer opens the Design Errors dialog which states that the wall mounts require a hole in hanging parts required to add the powdercoat, and if you click the &amp;quot;Fix error&amp;quot; button the Edit Assembly dialog opens (erroneously). The warning can safely be ignored, since the wall mounts are welded on so they are not hung separately from the chassis. The defective warning and response will be fixed in an upcoming release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mirror Y===&lt;br /&gt;
When you click '''Mirror Y''' for an object (including text), the object does not stay in the exact same place, and you can get a Boundary Warning even if it is nowhere near a boundary. Until this is fixed, simply accept the placement, then move it back where you wanted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Vector graphics===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer does not support the ''display'' of vector files, but the production of enclosures with graphics at Protocase does require their ''use.'' For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding Images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===L-shape and rackmount enclosures===&lt;br /&gt;
L-shape and rackmount enclosure designs created before January 2013, when loaded into the current Designer version, might have offset cutouts. If you encounter this problem, please email the design file to designer@protocase.com stating the problem, and we will manually convert the file for you at no charge. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Loading personal cutouts===&lt;br /&gt;
Cutout Library Manager &amp;gt; Create Sub Assembly: When loading an item you have created, it is not yet displayed in the 3D View.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a PEM===&lt;br /&gt;
When placing a PEM or screw, if you click any tool, the items are placed and shown in the 3D View exactly ''as if'' you had clicked the '''Accept &amp;amp; Close''' button, but those items are not accepted, quoted or saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements | Planned Enhancements]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released | Software Fixes Released]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3712</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3712"/>
				<updated>2017-09-18T18:40:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Known issues */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import, place and display scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen &lt;br /&gt;
*Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes the latest stocked silkscreen color:&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have had reports of issues with Windows 10 and Protocase Designer 4.6. We are investigating these currently and will have solutions as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few additional problems exist in this version; please see [[Knowledgebase - Known Issues]] for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the [[Knowledgebase - Software Fixes Released]] page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3704</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3704"/>
				<updated>2017-09-07T13:45:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Download for free here.  View the 4.6.8 release notes here: Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/ here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3703</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3703"/>
				<updated>2017-09-05T18:59:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import, place and display scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen &lt;br /&gt;
*Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes the latest stocked silkscreen color:&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
A few problems exist in this version; please see Known Issues for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the Software Fixes Released page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3702</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3702"/>
				<updated>2017-09-05T18:58:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting Protocase Designer Files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import and place scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen &lt;br /&gt;
*Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes the latest stocked silkscreen color:&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
A few problems exist in this version; please see Known Issues for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the Software Fixes Released page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3701</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3701"/>
				<updated>2017-09-05T18:57:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Silkscreen colors */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import and place scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen &lt;br /&gt;
*Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes the latest stocked silkscreen color:&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' the IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
A few problems exist in this version; please see Known Issues for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the Software Fixes Released page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3700</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3700"/>
				<updated>2017-09-05T18:55:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Fonts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import and place scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen &lt;br /&gt;
*Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes a new silkscreen color&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' the IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
A few problems exist in this version; please see Known Issues for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the Software Fixes Released page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3699</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3699"/>
				<updated>2017-09-05T18:54:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Lock items */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import and place scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade *Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen *Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes a new silkscreen color&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' the IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
A few problems exist in this version; please see Known Issues for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the Software Fixes Released page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3698</id>
		<title>Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Protocase_Designer_Version_4.6.8_Release_Notes-Aug_30,17&amp;diff=3698"/>
				<updated>2017-09-05T18:52:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Fonts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Version 4.6.8 Release Notes'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Lock items===&lt;br /&gt;
Designer now supports the ability to lock objects in the Face Editor to prevent them from being moved, edited or deleted. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The lock function can be used on all types of objects, including:&lt;br /&gt;
*Cutouts&lt;br /&gt;
*Graphics&lt;br /&gt;
*Fasteners&lt;br /&gt;
*Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
You can also lock several objects at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface &amp;amp; help===&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer's interface is now streamlined with new buttons and tool menus. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Context Help &amp;amp; Tool Tips have been added throughout the software to provide additional help and guidance on how to use each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Printing &amp;amp; Silkscreening===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scalable Vector Graphics'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now supports the ability to import and place scalable vector graphic files (.SVG) in addition to bitmap images.&lt;br /&gt;
*All other types of vector graphic files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can be uploaded and added to your design file, but it will not actually be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fonts===&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase designer now supports the ability to upload your own fonts. In the Face Editor, click '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import fonts'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Archer &lt;br /&gt;
*Bank Gothic &lt;br /&gt;
*Britannic Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*CAC Futura Casual Bold &lt;br /&gt;
*Gunblade *Gunship &lt;br /&gt;
*Pirulen *Prototype &lt;br /&gt;
*Segoe Print &lt;br /&gt;
*Serifa BT &lt;br /&gt;
*Serpentine Com Medium Oblique &lt;br /&gt;
*Sui Generis Free &lt;br /&gt;
*Charter BT Black&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_fonts.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following fonts have been removed:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*HandWriting&lt;br /&gt;
*Viking Stencil &lt;br /&gt;
*MarketingScript Shadow&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Powdercoat colors===&lt;br /&gt;
'''The following powdercoat colors have been added:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 33446 Desert Tan Smooth Flat Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 7040 Window Gray Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 17038 Black Full Gloss Smooth Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*FS 37038 Flat Black Smooth Flat Polyester Powder (Replaces Proto-Legacy Matte Black)&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3020 Traffic Red Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 3005 Wine Red Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
*RAL 1003 Signal Yellow Smooth Glossy Polyester Powder&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Silkscreen colors===&lt;br /&gt;
This release of Protocase Designer includes a new silkscreen color&lt;br /&gt;
*Pantone 201C, Epoxy Ink&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
*The Protocase Designer interface is now compatible with 4K monitors and high-resolution screens.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change your display interface settings, you must click '''Edit &amp;gt; Preferences''' and change the Interface Settings - Buttons, Tools &amp;amp; Labels to Standard, Large or Custom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Designer now runs 64 bit on 64 bit windows machines, and 32 on 32 bit windows machines.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Exporting Protocase Designer Files===&lt;br /&gt;
You can now export your Protocase Designer assembly (.pda) as an IGES file. Click on Export Menu &amp;gt; Export Assembly to IGES.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' the IGES files exported from Protocase Designer are currently incompatible with SolidWorks, but will be useable with SolidWorks 2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Other fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
*Problems with screws missing on some small l-shape and u-shape&lt;br /&gt;
*Problem with rear of rear bend rackmount&lt;br /&gt;
*Incorrect calculation of number of silkscreen colors if bitmaps used&lt;br /&gt;
*Correct exclusion zones based on material and thickness&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Known issues===&lt;br /&gt;
A few problems exist in this version; please see Known Issues for details. As they are fixed, they will be recorded on the Software Fixes Released page, along with links to the Beta version containing the fixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3697</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3697"/>
				<updated>2017-09-01T14:32:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting an IGES file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This IGES export feature is compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks, and most other CAD.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3696</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3696"/>
				<updated>2017-09-01T14:03:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Exporting an IGES file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into the NX for design software.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This IGES export feature is available inside the 2018 release of Solidworks, and most other CAD.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in the NX software.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3695</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3695"/>
				<updated>2017-09-01T14:01:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* How to export IGES then Import into NX */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting an IGES file==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into the NX for design software.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in the NX software.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3694</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3694"/>
				<updated>2017-09-01T14:01:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* How to export IGES then Import into NX */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==How to export IGES then Import into NX==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into the NX for design software.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export each feature.&lt;br /&gt;
# Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in the NX software.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3693</id>
		<title>3D View Window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=3D_View_Window&amp;diff=3693"/>
				<updated>2017-09-01T13:39:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=3D View Window overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''A: 3D Standard toolbar'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B: 3D Viewport'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-main-labels_NEW.png|800px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D Standard Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3d_standard_toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are as listed below. '''Known Limitation:''' As of Version Jun09,16, which introduces new 3D View tools, the '''Edit Face''' button is displayed only in the left-hand toolbar. Prior to Version Jun09,16, the '''Edit Face''' button is in the 3D Standard toolbar.:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bent_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Bent'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces bent as in final manufacture.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Flat'''&lt;br /&gt;
| View assembly with faces flattened.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:New_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''New'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Create a new enclosure (load a new template).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Open_button_NEW2.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open an existing assembly (.PDA) file.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Save_button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Save the current design.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:save-as_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Save As'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Save the current design under a new filename. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Reset the view to the original default view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:View-angle_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''View Angle'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  View assembly from the front, right, top, left, back, or bottom, or in the default isometric mode. Note that if you rotate or zoom in any angle view, the view returns to isometric. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Part-tree_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part Tree'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which details all parts and faces for the current assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Help_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Question'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Open the help dialog, which lets you submit a question about your design and send it, with or without the design file and/or the debug log files, to Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Rotate'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Rotate the view.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png|30px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
|  Pan the view. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3D View Preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assembly==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button [[File:Make_new_enclosure_from_template_button_3DView.png|25px]] in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-newassembly-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:window-main-ushape_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Opening an existing assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the file you want to open.&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Saving a copy of an assembly====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Changing assembly properties=&lt;br /&gt;
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:3D_view_Edit_Properties_dialog_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead). &lt;br /&gt;
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Transferring an enclosure design===&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the design that you want to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' &amp;gt; '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a &amp;quot;front panel,&amp;quot; whereas a 1U Extruded has a &amp;quot;front plate,&amp;quot; whereas a U Shape has just a &amp;quot;front&amp;quot;), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose &amp;quot;Drop This Face&amp;quot; as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design). &lt;br /&gt;
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the model=&lt;br /&gt;
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotating==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the model and drag it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Press and hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then click and drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''' &lt;br /&gt;
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show/Hide Parts==&lt;br /&gt;
The Show/Hide Parts command lets you view inside the model by hiding one or more parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Show/Hide Parts'''. The Show/Hide Parts dialog box is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select or clear the appropriate check boxes to show or hide parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toggle flat/bent view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' [[File:Flat_button_NEW.png‎]] button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' [[File:Bent_button_3d_standard_toolbar.png‎]] button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Flat'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset view==&lt;br /&gt;
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button  [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Editing a face=&lt;br /&gt;
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To open the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:button-editface_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the Part Tree=&lt;br /&gt;
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigate the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change object name and description==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a new name or description on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/Delete notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support&lt;br /&gt;
such as &amp;quot;Please scrub this with a scouring pad&amp;quot;. You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase DesignerÂ® but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note &amp;quot;Add 6-32 x 3/8&amp;quot; standoff here&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click an object name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the arrows to view each note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing a face from the Part Tree==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click a face name on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-parttree-ushape-editface_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
==How to export IGES then Import into NX==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3692</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3692"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T19:24:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/index-august.php here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3691</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3691"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T19:22:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/index-august.php here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3690</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3690"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T19:00:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/index-august.php here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png&amp;diff=3689</id>
		<title>File:Designer 4.6.8 homescreen banner new.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner_new.png&amp;diff=3689"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T19:00:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner.png&amp;diff=3688</id>
		<title>File:Designer 4.6.8 homescreen banner.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner.png&amp;diff=3688"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T18:59:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: Jfinney uploaded a new version of File:Designer 4.6.8 homescreen banner.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3687</id>
		<title>Face Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor&amp;diff=3687"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T18:55:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: /* Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Face Editor overview=&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.  &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-labels3_NEW.png|1000px|Face Editor Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Menu bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains File, Edit, Cutout Library and Fasteners, Grid, View, Graphics, and Help menus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Standard toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains common commands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, and Zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Mode toolbar&lt;br /&gt;
:Contains tools to add shapes, text, and images to the face, as well as exclusion and masking zones and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Viewport&lt;br /&gt;
:Working area that shows a 2D view of your enclosure face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Status bar&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays the currently selected view, X- and Y coordinates of the pointer, side of face showing (outside or inside), and the name of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2D Properties panel&lt;br /&gt;
:Displays context-sensitive Help and properties that can be changed for the selected object.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2D Standard Toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2D-toolbar_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
From left to right, the buttons are:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-acceptclose_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Accept'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Accept changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reject button_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reject'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject changes and close Face Editor to view results in 3D.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Cut'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Cut object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Copy'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Copy object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Paste'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Paste object(s) that have been cut or copied.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-PartView.png|50px|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Part View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Open the Assembly Tree dialog, which lists each part, face, and design element: &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Window-parttree-ushape-note_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom In'''&lt;br /&gt;
|Zoom in on the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Zoom_Out_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Zoom Out'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Reset View'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom out from the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-togglegrid_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Toggle Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off the grid display. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-gridsize_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Grid Size'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Change the grid size.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-snapgrid.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Snap to Grid'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggle on/off snapping to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png‎‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Undo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Undo your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Redo_button_NEW.png‎|30px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Redo'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Repeat your last action. .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Back'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the back of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Front'''&lt;br /&gt;
| Display the front of the face.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png‎‎|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Pan'''&lt;br /&gt;
| When dragging the mouse, do not act on objects but just pan the face. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Face Editor preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Viewing the face=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Panning==&lt;br /&gt;
To pan the model or face, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the 3D View:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the model.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Hold down the &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; key, then drag the model.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Face Editor:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click the '''Pan''' button [[File:Pan_button_NEW.png]] in the toolbar, then drag the face.&lt;br /&gt;
::''or''&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click and hold down the mouse wheel-button while dragging the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Zooming==&lt;br /&gt;
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following. &lt;br /&gt;
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Zoom_In_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Zoom_Out_button.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To zoom in on a particular area:&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resetting the view==&lt;br /&gt;
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset_View_button_NEW.png|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Reset Zoom'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing the front or back of the face==&lt;br /&gt;
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, choose '''View''' &amp;gt; '''Toggle Side Showing'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toggle-Side-Showing-command_NEW.png|175px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Or, you can use the 2D Standard toolbar buttons to display either side:&lt;br /&gt;
*To display the back of the face, click the '''Inside''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] or '''Back''' [[File:Button-ViewInside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
*To display the front of the face, click the '''Outside''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] or '''Front''' [[File:Button-ViewOutside_NEW.png]] button. &lt;br /&gt;
(If an enclosure is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Inside''' and '''Outside'''. If a panel is displayed, the buttons are labeled '''Back''' and '''Front'''.) Whichever button you click becomes shaded to indicate that it is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Coordinate System=&lt;br /&gt;
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing the Units of Measure===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default unit of measure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Drawing shapes=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting the drawing (object) type==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the &amp;quot;Mode&amp;quot; label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Cutout object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Graphic object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====&lt;br /&gt;
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press &amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.). &lt;br /&gt;
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:&lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is &amp;quot;None&amp;quot;; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.&lt;br /&gt;
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads. &lt;br /&gt;
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The printed area must be no more than 46&amp;quot;x46&amp;quot;, and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24&amp;quot; high.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.  &lt;br /&gt;
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Preferences'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Exclusion object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Masking object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Construct object type===&lt;br /&gt;
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects  never affect production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing circles==&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing ellipses==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing rectangles and squares==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing custom paths==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creating an arc using the Path tool====&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing &amp;lt;A&amp;gt;). &lt;br /&gt;
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====&lt;br /&gt;
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To merge two or more objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE4_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a merged object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE5_NEW.png]]    [[File:EXAMPLE-MERGE6_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To trim two or more objects'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Place a circle on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim1_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim2_NEW2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Trim''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The outline of each object is outlined, the cursor icon turns into an eraser (not shown in these examples).&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the eraser to eliminate the lines you do not want.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode.  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Important!'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also: '''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Solving problems with merging objects====&lt;br /&gt;
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you then merge them and click &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well. &lt;br /&gt;
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When completed, click the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing lines==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag to set the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drawing arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face and begin typing.&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''&amp;lt;Enter&amp;gt;''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''',  and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding special characters====&lt;br /&gt;
You can add any special character such as the registered trademark symbol to text, as follows. (The &amp;lt;Alt&amp;gt; character code method is not supported.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the character from any site such as [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script Wikipedia] or from the Character Map application in Windows. &lt;br /&gt;
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example_NEW.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip'''   The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:registered_trademark_example2_NEW.png|border|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/  '''Spotting the Difference'''].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.) &lt;br /&gt;
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).&lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received. &lt;br /&gt;
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves. &lt;br /&gt;
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Exporting images====&lt;br /&gt;
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Import font'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes''': &lt;br /&gt;
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it. &lt;br /&gt;
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts. &lt;br /&gt;
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the Measure tool=&lt;br /&gt;
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the centre of the circle cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure1_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter &amp;quot;5&amp;quot; in '''x difference''' and &amp;quot;-3&amp;quot; in '''y difference'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-front-measure-moved1_NEW.png|500px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:tool-measure_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point). &lt;br /&gt;
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.  &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Window-faceeditor-ushape-measure1_NEW2.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of  &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; and an '''x difference''' of &amp;quot;1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying measurements==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Button-Dimension_NEW.png|80px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The distance of &amp;quot;0.000&amp;quot; is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-2_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance between the two points;&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and&lt;br /&gt;
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure. &lt;br /&gt;
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed.  The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-3_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-4_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-5_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:example-Dimension-6_NEW.png|border]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a displayed measurement'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Do either of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Highlight the line and press the &amp;lt;Delete&amp;gt; key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''See Also''''' &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Face Editor#Measuring distances|Using the Measure tool]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Using the grid=&lt;br /&gt;
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turn on/off the Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click Toggle Grid. [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, select '''Toggle Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-grid_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Grid on with 2 in width and height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Standard toolbar, click '''Snap to Grid''' [[File:button-snapgrid_NEW.png|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#*On the Grid menu, click '''Snap to Grid'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat to toggle the state of '''Snap to Grid'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing grid size and offset===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click [[File:button-gridsize_NEW.png|bottom]] or choose '''Grid Size''' from the '''Grid''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:dialogbox-faceeditor-gridsize_NEW.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-cutout-gridoffset_NEW.png|500px|thumb|left|Grid with 2 in width and height, 1 in Offset Width and Offset Height]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Managing object properties=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:top_of_properties_panel_NEW.png|thumb|Top of Properties panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-circle-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkcreened circle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-propertiespane-text-silkscreen_NEW.png|thumb|Properties panel for silkscreened text]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top of Properties Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the line that reads &amp;quot;Click to Expand Context Help&amp;quot; to read usage tips for the current object you are editing (circle, ellipse, text, etcetera). Click anywhere in the upper panel again to hide the help. &lt;br /&gt;
* For help on the Layers buttons and its toolbar, please see [[Face Editor#Adding and managing layers|Adding and managing layers]].&lt;br /&gt;
* The checkbox &amp;quot;On This Side&amp;quot; is selected when the object is on the side that you are editing. Clear the check box to move the object to the other side of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fill===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Thickness===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color===&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Type===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* Object types include:&lt;br /&gt;
:Cutout&lt;br /&gt;
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)&lt;br /&gt;
:Exclusion&lt;br /&gt;
:Construct&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Origin===&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.&lt;br /&gt;
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Circles''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Paths''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Lines''' -- start point&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Circles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.&lt;br /&gt;
===Ellipses===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).&lt;br /&gt;
===Rectangles===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Lines===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.&lt;br /&gt;
===Images===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
===Text===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Path===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding notes==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Round the corners of this rectangle to a radius of .05 inches.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put a hinged door over this cutout.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Put rubber feet on this face.”&lt;br /&gt;
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering &amp;amp; Design Services will give you the correct quote.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a note to an object'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the blank text window in the Properties panel. When done, click either arrow above the text box, or any other tool in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:notes_tools_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.&lt;br /&gt;
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a general note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' [[File:3D_View_-_Part_Tree_button_NEW.png|40px]] button.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type the note in the bottom text window. In the following example, a note was added to the assembly.  &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Assembly_Tree_example_NEW.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To delete a note'''''&lt;br /&gt;
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View &amp;gt; View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:view_notes_window_NEW.png|500 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding cutouts=&lt;br /&gt;
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Cutout Library'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:library_manager_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_changes_when_click_place_item_button_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cursor_stays_to_place_item_multiple_times_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a cutout by selecting it from the Cutout Library and Fasteners menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method when you know exactly which cutout you want to load.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, drill down through the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''main library''' or '''personal library''' listings, and click on the name of the cutout that you want to load. &lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Adding cutouts menu_NEW.png|600px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The cursor changes to an image of the cutout; click each location on the face where you want to place the cutout. &lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done, press &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding &amp;quot;D&amp;quot; port cutouts==&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it. &lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding cutouts that cross the edge of a face==&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Designer to allow you to choose to cut the edge of the face when placing an object across a face boundary. This is also known as making notches. Click here to read a blog post about the usefulness of notches: http://www.protocase.com/blog/2017/05/02/what-to-do-when-cutouts-and-other-components-need-to-be-placed-close-to-a-bend/&lt;br /&gt;
#In [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''']], set '''Error Response''' to ''ASK.'' This will cause Designer to prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement when you draw or move a cutout so that it lies across the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Also in Preferences, clear the '''Cut Face''' check box. (If you select the check box, Designer will not give you a choice, but will automatically cut the boundary.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:Cut-face preferences_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to save the Preferences settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#:From now on, when you draw or move an object across a boundary, you receive the prompt, as shown below when a rectangle is being created across the panel's top.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:cut_face_prompt_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you choose '''Accept and Cut Face''', the face is cut accordingly:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:After-cutting-face_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding hardware=&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding self-clinching fasteners==&lt;br /&gt;
Protocase uses PEM&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; brand self-clinching fasteners.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' &amp;gt; '''Place Self Clinching Fasteners'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:self-clinching_fastener_selection_dialog_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the thread '''Length'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a '''Part Number'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with &amp;quot;ZI&amp;quot;.) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Edit''' button [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the '''Esc''' key.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-pem_NEW.png|400px|Placing Self-Clinching Fasteners]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-pem_NEW2.png|400px|Self-Clinching Fasteners on bottom face (cover hidden)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding hardware such as handles==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Standard toolbar, click '''Grid''' [[File:button-togglegrid_NEW.png|35px|bottom]] to show the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, click '''Cutout Library''', point to '''Hardware''', then select a hardware item.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are done adding hardware, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]].&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|Placing handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-main-ushape-handles_NEW.png|600px|U-Shape enclosure with handles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a countersink to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-countersink_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;100.0° #2&amp;quot; indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[File:message-incorrect-cutout-size_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Adding multiple countersinks to a face'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*To add multiple countersinks  to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Countersink''' check box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a tapped hole to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:checkbox-and-list-tapped_hole_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of &amp;quot;2-56 [0.07]&amp;quot; indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07&amp;quot; for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.) &lt;br /&gt;
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:Tapped_hole_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Adding multiple tapped holes to a face'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*To add multiple tapped holes to a face at one time, draw a circle for each hole, click the '''Edit''' button, select all circles, and then click the '''Tapped Hole''' check box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding screws to a face====&lt;br /&gt;
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.&lt;br /&gt;
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacing screws and PEMs====&lt;br /&gt;
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM  (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the screw. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, notice the new '''Replace...''' button, which includes the part name of the screw. (Only part of the part name is visible on the button; to read the entire name, hover over the button.)&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:SCREW_INFO.jpg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#To replace the screw with a PEM (or a PEM with another PEM), click the button. The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the '''Thread Type''' and '''Part Number''', and then click the '''Place PEM''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
''Alternate method'': Right-click a screw and choose '''Properties''' to review and/or replace the screw with a PEM. The Properties window also lets you edit the '''Origin(X)''', '''Origin(Y)''', '''Rotation''', and the side of the face that the screw sticks up out of.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:window-newassembly-noselection_NEW.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New4.4.9-Dialog-Brackets-NewAssemblySPECS_NEW2.png|400 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The 3D View window opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the '''Cutout Library Manager''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#You are prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure); click '''OK''' and then do so. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The New Library Item dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:New_library_item_dialog_NEW.png|300 px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is &amp;quot;L Bracket by Base - Bottom&amp;quot;. ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Part Number''' &lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Description''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''OK.'''&lt;br /&gt;
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.&lt;br /&gt;
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)  &lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Place Item''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manipulating objects=&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
#On the '''Drawing''' toolbar, select the '''Edit''' tool. [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Do one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#*To select multiple objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click the first object, then down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and click the other objects; or&lt;br /&gt;
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects. &lt;br /&gt;
#::[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-selection_NEW.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.&lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:selected_objects_NEW.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a single object'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''. &lt;br /&gt;
''or''&lt;br /&gt;
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To edit a group'''''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the group as a whole, or you can edit each individual object in the group. To edit the group as a whole, follow the instructions above for a single object. To edit individual objects in a group:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button in the Properties panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group1_NEW.png|border]]&lt;br /&gt;
#The group of objects is displayed in the Cutout Editor. This screen is like the Face Editor, but only the group of objects is displayed. You can now edit any of the individual objects in the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#;[[file:editing_a_group2_NEW.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are finished editing the objects in the group, click '''Accept and Close''' [[File:button-acceptclose_NEW.png|20px|bottom]] in the Face Editor toolbar. The Cutout Editor closes, and the group is displayed as usual in the Face Editor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*To ungroup the items, edit them individually, then regroup the items without leaving the Face Editor, see [[Face_Editor#Group_and_ungroup_objects|Grouping and ungrouping objects]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving object(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To move a single object:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move several objects:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all the objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To move cutouts from one face to another:&lt;br /&gt;
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items. &lt;br /&gt;
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with. &lt;br /&gt;
:For detailed instructions, see:&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locking item(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
To lock a single object:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the object.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To Lock several objects:&lt;br /&gt;
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the &amp;quot;Is locked&amp;quot; button under the properties menu to lock the items.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grouping and ungrouping objects==&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To group objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the &amp;lt;Shift&amp;gt; key and select each object. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To ungroup objects'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the group.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note'''  When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''See Also'''&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Aligning and distributing objects==&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select 2 or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Properties panel, click an Alignment or Distribute command.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignment'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Notes:'''''&lt;br /&gt;
*Objects align to the first object selected.&lt;br /&gt;
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:window-faceeditor-ushape-align_NEW.png|600px|thumb|left|Objects with bottoms aligned and centers distributed evenly]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Distribute'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select one or more objects.&lt;br /&gt;
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button [[File:Button-Cut_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Cut'''. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button [[File:Button-Copy_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Copy'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button [[File:Button-Paste_NEW.png|30px|bottom]] or choose '''Edit''' &amp;gt; '''Paste'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press the &amp;lt;Esc&amp;gt; key when you are done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Undoing and Redoing actions==&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] button in the Face Editor toolbar, or choose '''Undo''' or '''Redo''' from the '''Edit''' menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and managing layers==&lt;br /&gt;
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Layer Toolbar'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.&lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.) &lt;br /&gt;
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To add a new layer '''''&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:layer_controls_in_face_editor_NEW.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#:The Input dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).&lt;br /&gt;
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''&lt;br /&gt;
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Paste the object(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===&lt;br /&gt;
#To print a single face, display the face in the Face Editor and choose '''Print To Scale''' from the '''File''' menu. To print all faces of the enclosure, choose the same command in the 3D View window.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===To calibrate the printer===&lt;br /&gt;
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
#A test page opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle. &lt;br /&gt;
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens. &lt;br /&gt;
#:[[File:dialog-PrintToScale-Record_Measurements.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#If the printed rectangle is not 3&amp;quot; x 3&amp;quot;, then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Exporting and importing face templates=&lt;br /&gt;
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.&lt;br /&gt;
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics &amp;gt; Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image. &lt;br /&gt;
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Example-Trim2_NEW2.png&amp;diff=3686</id>
		<title>File:Example-Trim2 NEW2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=File:Example-Trim2_NEW2.png&amp;diff=3686"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T18:54:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3685</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3685"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T18:31:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download for free [http://www.protocasedesigner.com/index-august.php here]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3684</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3684"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T18:11:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Free download here: http://www.protocasedesigner.com/index-august.php. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3683</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=3683"/>
				<updated>2017-08-31T18:08:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jfinney: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Designer_4.6.8_homescreen_banner.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Download here: http://www.protocasedesigner.com/index-august.php. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; View the 4.6.8 release notes here: [[Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17|'''Protocase Designer Version 4.6.8 Release Notes-Aug 30,17''']]=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
='''Protocase Designer&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Documentation'''=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User Guide==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Glossary]]====&lt;br /&gt;
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Quick Start]]====&lt;br /&gt;
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[3D View Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Cutout Library]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====&lt;br /&gt;
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Tell Me About...]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Release Notes]]====&lt;br /&gt;
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get Help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[FAQ]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[[Knowledgebase]]====&lt;br /&gt;
Includes:&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====&lt;br /&gt;
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jfinney</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>